Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. electrical. 3 . such as duct. electrical panels. such as mechanical equipment. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Add more detailed modelling elements. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. fixtures. Add basic MEP elements. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and piping. and plumbing fixtures. Germany. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. In this exercise. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Metric file names have an _m suffix. your Training folder may be in a different location. So. and tags. When you install the training files as instructed. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. For example. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. as well as how to open and save them. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. when you add ductwork. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you can choose to save your work. When you open a training file. Imperial file names have an _i suffix.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. you learn where the training files are located. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . templates. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. annotations. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. to provide a richer and more finished design. Contact your CAD manager for more information. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Create schedules. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. however. NOTE Depending on your installation. On the Contents tab. You do not design entire systems. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. and sheets to document the project. is located and accessed in the training files location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However. Create detail views. After completing each exercise. views. For example. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. such as templates and families.

If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. and click Open. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and click Save. and click the Training Files icon. For File name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. double-click Imperial or Metric. the Open dialog displays. For example. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the right pane. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close.rvt. verify that Project Files (*. a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. and you can open any supported file type. You may close the file with or without saving changes. scroll down. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. you are prompted to save the changes. click ➤ Save As.rvt and make changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. enter the new file name.rvt) is selected. if you open settings. For Files of type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 4 Click the training file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.

6 .

the hierarchy of elements. the operation of the software is parametric. the parameter is one of association or connection. sections. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In this case. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. every drawing sheet. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and phases when you need it. drawings. If the length of the elevation is changed. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. In the Revit MEP model. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. You learn the terminology. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. schedules. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. quantities. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. If you move the partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the floor or roof remains connected. 2D and 3D view. drawing sheets. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and plans. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. hence. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the door retains this relationship to the partition. scope.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. ■ ■ 7 .

grids. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. dimensions. ducts. walls and ceilings are hosts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. boilers. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. When you change something. For example. sprinklers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. They help to describe or document the design. and reference planes are datum elements. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Examples include detail lines. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. boilers. For example. tags. sinks. and electrical panels. dimensions. filled regions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and electrical panels. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. levels. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. They display in relevant views of the design. sprinklers. ducts. For example. and 2D detail components. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Datum elements help to define project context. tags. and keynotes are annotation elements. sinks. For example.

first floor. from geometry to construction data. for example. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. programming is not required. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. families. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and drawings of the design. Often. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. elevation views. and types. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. However. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. In Revit MEP. For example.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. views of the project. you must be in a section or elevation view. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. By using a single project file. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. such as roofs. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. and so forth). The project file contains all information for the building design. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. top of wall. section views. and ceilings. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you do nothing to establish these relationships. This information includes components used to design the model. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. In other cases. Project: In Revit MEP. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Most often. schedules. If you can draw. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. floors. To place levels. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . or bottom of foundation. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. you can explicitly control them. North .

10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. With a few clicks. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Unlike system and standard component families. You can also display several project views at one time. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Then experiment with them. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. identical use. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. each in-place family contains only a single type. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. A type can also be a style. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. showing. However. such as a A0 title block. System families include ducts. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. For example. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. hiding. and wires. A type can be a specific size of a family.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and similar graphical representation. System families can be transferred between projects. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. pipes. Type: Each family can have several types.

you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To return the panel to the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.

tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.. data and systems. then select what you want to modify. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. architect-specific tools. tools used for editing existing elements. When working on the Modify tab. and for switching views. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and settings. select the tool first. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and CAD files. tools used for running analysis on the current design.. project and system parameters. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.

A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides requested information. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. For example. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. To keep a panel expanded. displays frequently used tools. By default. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . provides access to common tools. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. when adding duct.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a template and create a new drawing. click.... Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a file to open. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. (Export) On the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Open) save the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.

Camera.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Publish) print the current drawing. or template file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. To enable or disable a tool item. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. (Print) access product and license information... (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family.. family. click. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. but is not enabled by default. saves a current project. provides views including Default 3D. annotation. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. to. or template file.On the application menu. annotation. publish the current project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Licensing) close the file. and Walkthrough.

the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do.To undo or redo a series of operations. when you switch to another editing mode. When you are highlighting an element or component. Modify. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. workshared components. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. repeat the command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Clipboard. Starting with the most recent command. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. To hide the Status Bar. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. When you are using a command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. or the Family Editor. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. displaying the same information. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. check the Status Bar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. To show the Status Bar again. However. Group. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. This displays the command history in a list. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Clear the Status Bar check mark. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. In addition. a tool tip appears next to the cursor.

Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. select one or more elements of the same category. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. click (Modify). On the Quick Access toolbar. for example. Place a Wall. When you place an element in a drawing. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.To cancel or exit the current command. To change existing elements to a different type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. After you are familiar with these tasks.rvt. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom the view In the tutorials. click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 6 Click in the drawing area. click . 9 To display SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. To modify or add snap increments. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. the view zooms in on the selected area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. In the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. on the Navigation bar.

moving the wheel to the desired location. press ESC.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 11 Click and hold the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. and click tin the Options dialog. Click and drag to orbit the design. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. As you move the mouse. ➤ Options. and then using the Zoom tool again. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 14 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click the SteeringWheels tab. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.

2 Enter ZR.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . Similar controls. These are the drag controls. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.Design. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Small blue dots. called drag controls. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. referred to as shape handles. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. After you are familiar with these tasks. as shown.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. display along the ends. bottoms. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Level 2 . and select the duct. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.

Move. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). select the first item in the list. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. or press CTRL+Z. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. 6 On the Undo menu.

Some commands. After selecting the element to move. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and drag it to the left as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. as shown. you want to move the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. 10 Move the cursor to the right. 11 With the duct already selected. such as Move and Copy. and click again to specify the ending position. click to specify the starting position. for example.

Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For example. 13 To end a command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Supply. Press ESC twice. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 14 Enter VG. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Select Mechanical . Click OK. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as the Modify Ducts command.End a command Some commands.Return. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

such as the default project units and settings. Finally. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can either select a template from the template library. and open North. link files. and geometry from the starting template. New projects inherit all the families. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. select Project. 7 In the Project Browser. create and manage views. under Template file. system families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. use copy/monitor. 27 . 2 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric ➤ Templates. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. such as ducts and pipes. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. you learn how to start a project from a template. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. such as coordination review and interference checking. and click Open. click Training files. 6 Click OK. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. the default building levels and standard views. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). You can choose from several templates. In that case.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. under Create new. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. click Browse. settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 5 In the New Project dialog. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and loadable families.rte template. and modify system settings. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.

■ ■ Under Create new. for City. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. under Energy Analysis. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Click OK. create another new project using the Construction template. For example. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for Energy Data. select School or University. Click Cancel. (Browse). In the Choose Template dialog. you can select it now. select Project template. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. For Location. select Level 1. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. click Edit. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. NH.rte template and click Open. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 10 Using the same method. click Browse. navigate to Metric Templates. select Manchester. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. click (Browse). Click OK twice. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. ■ For Building Construction. When you select the material. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab.8 In the drawing area. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. If you want to use a template other than the default. review the construction materials listed.

and demand factors for electrical systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical.rfa and click Open. 25 In the left pane.00 mm. click Round. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. under Duct Settings. power distribution systems. 110. select Views. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 260. 24 In the right pane. wiring. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. For Categories.00 mm.00 mm. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 22 In the right pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. plumbing. 23 In the left pane.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. for 20. under Pipe Settings. for 90. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Identity Data. 290.00 mm. 110. Holding CTRL. click Wiring. and 140. 33 Click OK. 26 In the right pane. piping. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. After standard settings have been established for an organization.00 mm.000 mm. click Sizes. 27 Click OK. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for 90. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.00 mm.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 140. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Rectangular. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. Click OK twice. and 310. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. and fire protection systems.

and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Linking Projects In this exercise. families.rvt. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Associated Level. To enable this coordination. select Auto . Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Sub-Discipline. 38 Close the file. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. under Template file. From the Positioning list. select Project. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Browse. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select View Name. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. click Training. 5 Click OK. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. For Then by. sheets. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Type/Discipline and click Edit. under Create new. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Family and Type. In addition. Click Open. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. For Then by. 4 In the New Project dialog. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. You need to create the MEP model for the project.Origin to Origin. For Sort by. and groups that are contained in a project. 2 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the file is saved as a template.

Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .Mech. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. Linking Projects | 31 .The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 12 Click OK. under Constraints. select Room Bounding. select the linked architectural model. 8 If necessary.

25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 19 On the left side of the view.Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. click the level line for 03. 17 On the Options Bar. click Plan View types.

The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. for the link file. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. and the level 4. a warning message displays. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. click Custom. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. appears above the copied elements. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. If you modify a monitored element. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. warnings notify you of any violations. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. indicating that an element has changed. highlight the linked model. 34 On the Basics tab. 29 In the drawing area. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. After copying. level 3. Linking Projects | 33 . click By Host View. indicating that a relationship is established. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. and click to select the linked model. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. select Custom.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. and that the copied elements are monitored. 27 In the drawing area.

36 Click OK. Site.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. deselect Parking. deselect Levels. 7 Click OK twice. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 3 In the View templates dialog. select Custom. Click OK. Planting. for the link file. click Custom. enter Mechanical View and click OK. 2 In the New View Template dialog. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. Under Visibility. under View Properties. click Custom. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Select Show categories from all disciplines. and Topography.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. 5 On the Basics tab. Roads. Under Visibility. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. Click OK. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. for Name. click Edit.

you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. click Training Files. click Browse. notification preferences. 3 Under Colors. journal cleanup options. click the Graphics tab. 7 Click OK. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. These settings control the graphics. Notice that the drawing area is black. select Invert background color. 5 In the New Project dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. under Template file. they are not saved to project files or template files. and click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. and your username when using worksharing. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. 9 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 8 Click ➤ Options. Modifying System Settings | 35 .rte. selection default options. 2 In the Options dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. select Mechanical and click OK. under View Templates. Modifying General System Options In this exercise.

the elements causing the error display using this color. select None. and family libraries. click the File Locations tab. 19 Press ESC to end the command. select yellow. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. family template files. 13 Under Notifications. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 21 Close the file without saving it. 18 Select the wall. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 2 In the Options dialog. 14 Click OK. When an error occurs. click the value for Selection color. including your default project template. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select One hour. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. For Tooltip assistance. 11 In the Color dialog. 12 Click the General tab. 17 Press ESC to end the command. you specify default file locations.10 Under Colors. and click OK. However.

such as in a large. note the list of library names. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. click Browse. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. click Browse. saving. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. under Default path for family template files. TIP To view a template. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. When you are opening. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. However. and you can create new libraries. 10 In the Places dialog. 7 In the Options dialog. or loading a Revit MEP file. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Places. Save. and click Open. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click Browse. ➤ New ➤ Project. In the following illustration. Click and click Browse to select a template. and Import dialogs. Specifying File Locations | 37 . 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files. Load. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 8 Click Cancel. centralized.3 Under Default template file. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. you can start a new project with that template. You can modify the existing library names and path. select the folder to save your files to by default.

or families.11 In the Places dialog. ➤ Open. and click (Browse). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Load. and change the name to My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and select it as the library path. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click the My Library icon. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and Import dialogs. click (Add Value). Save. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click OK twice. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. templates. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click My Library. and click Open. 15 Under Library Name.

6 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Ignore words in uppercase.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. click Edit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. If you work in a large office. 9 In the text editor. 14 Click in the drawing area. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. custom color files. click the Spelling tab. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. view the current path. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 19 Click Cancel. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 2 In the Options dialog. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 3 Under Settings. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. This path is determined during installation. click Places. and decal image files. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Edit. 27 Click OK. 11 In the Options dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 20 Click ➤ Options. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 22 Select My Library. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 21 On the File Locations tab. click OK. such as bump maps. If you want to relocate this path. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . (Remove Value) to delete the library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 5 In the text editor. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 23 Click 24 Click OK. specify the new location here. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.

rte. click Edit. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. As you zoom in and out within a view. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. under Dimension Snaps. you modify snap settings. 21 Under Personal dictionary.17 In the Spelling dialog. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. under Template file. click Close. and enter 500 . 6 In the Snaps dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 24 In the Options dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Training Files. click Browse. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Restore Defaults. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 4 In the New Project dialog. 22 In the text editor. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 20 Under Settings. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. In this exercise. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 25 Close the file without saving it. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. You can turn snap settings on and off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file.. 23 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. you modify snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. 2 In the New Project dialog. click OK. work with snapping turned off.

If you do not have a wheel button. click OK. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. If it does not. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 10 On the Options Bar. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. enter SM. 8 In the Snaps dialog. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. This is the increment that you added previously. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. and move the cursor to the right. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.7 Under Object Snaps. For example. deselect Chain. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. TIP To zoom while sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. use the wheel button on your mouse. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. zoom out until it does so.

the midpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. Notice that snapping is once again active. and move the cursor to the right. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 19 Enter SM. with or without saving it. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and the wall edges. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and delete the value 500 . 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. If you move the cursor along the wall.. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. it will snap to the endpoints. 25 Click OK. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Do not set the wall end point. and specify the wall endpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Close the file.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you first plan the system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In this exercise. This system consists of a cooling tower. After applying a color scheme to the zones. water source heat pump (WSHP). duct system and a hydronic piping system. methodology. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 45 . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. After finishing each exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. and then you create a plenum level. you will understand the process.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. If the tutorial training files are not present. go to http://www. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.autodesk. you first configure the linked architectural model. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. By following the recommended workflow. In this lesson.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. At the end of the tutorial. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. As you create the mechanical system. However. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.

Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.Space Plan is highlighted. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and double-click West . under Constraints. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and after the linked model highlights. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you add a level for plenums. roof. click to select it. ceilings. indicating that it’s the active view. In this section. select Room Bounding.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. click Training Files. NOTE When working with a linked file. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Next. not in the MEP training file.MEP. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. enter 2600mm. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 16 Press Esc. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Preparing Spaces | 47 . Verify that Make Plan View is selected. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. The new level is placed. and click Properties. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. 9 On the Draw panel. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and click OK. right-click Level 2 Plenum. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. For Offset. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click Plan View Types. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.

You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. In this exercise. Under View Depth. Under Extents. enter 0. In this exercise. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then place spaces in various types of areas. enter an Offset of 300mm. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However. select Design.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for View Range. for Top. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select MEP . it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. For Sub-Discipline. For View Classification. and for Offset. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. select Level Above (Level 3). for Level. and click Apply Default View Template. for View Scale. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. 20 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under Identity Data. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. NOTE After finishing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. for Default View Template. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . click Edit.Plenum. you place spaces in areas of the building model. ■ Click OK twice. select Plenum Plan. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. For Cut plane. In the next exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For (Tag Location). and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit. For Offset. select Horizontal. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. select New. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Placing Spaces | 49 . 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. click Training Files. select Level 2 Plenum. For Space.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and ceilings). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. walls.Space Plan is highlighted. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. enter 0. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.

8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. 14 In the drawing area. ensuring coordination between the files. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. Click OK. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 Click to place the space. enter 219. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 9 Select the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter Library.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Name.

enter 0.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. For Upper Limit. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Placing Spaces | 51 . Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. and then click Modify. 21 Using the method learned previously. select Level 3. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. For Offset.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. you place a space in a large corridor area. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. under Energy Analysis. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. and then press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. enter 0.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. for Upper Limit. and for Offset. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.

click in the name column. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and select Corridor. 9 In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and change the space number to 216A. which was numbered 219Q.7 In the Project Browser. 10 Click in the number column. and scroll to the newly placed space.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 15 Press Esc twice. as shown. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 11 Close the schedule view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a chase. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . place a space in the lower area of the split space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.rvt. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.

7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.4 Press Esc. right-click. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. select Interior and Reference. 10 In the plan view. for Upper Limit. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Roof Level. expand Spaces. and click Element Properties. enter 0. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click OK. click in the chase area to place the space. For Offset. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 6 Enter VG. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Level 3. select the space. In the plan view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. On the Options Bar. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase.

■ ■ 14 Click OK. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 15 Press Esc. Bounding elements (such as walls. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 17 Type ZF.■ For Limit Offset. All spaces in the view are tagged. ceilings. for Name. enter 225PC. and maximize the view. floors. and click OK. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . You enter a value that is above the level of the roof.Space Plan. For Number. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. enter 1200. Under Identity Data. under Loaded Tags. enter Chase. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. it is automatically added to the Default zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Reference. indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning is highlighted. click View ➤ Zones. In this exercise. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. 1 In the Project Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. under Spaces. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. which removes the space from the Default zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 3 Right-click in the System Browser. In the next exercises. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. After a space is placed in an area. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.rvt.20 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m.

and click OK. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning is highlighted. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Next. indicating that the space is occupiable. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. indicating that it’s the active view. click Reference. you assign spaces to zones in the building.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). select Occupiable. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. ) or 5 In the System Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. The graphic in the System Browser updates.rvt. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . click Training Files. the Edit Zone tab displays. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and a new zone is created. To display space reference lines. under Energy Analysis. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Spaces. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. you assign spaces to a zone. As you do this. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 7 Close the file with or without saving it. The Zone tool is active. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.

■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and click Finish Editing Zone. Instruction. Expand HVAC Zones. select Computer Lab 222. 4 In the drawing area. 5 With the drawing area active. Using the Edit Zone tab. Click OK. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and modify the zone properties. you need to activate the zone visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. and Electrical 220 spaces. Instruction 221. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. In the System Browser. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. type VG. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).

under Spaces. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In this exercise. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. enter 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).West . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. under Identity Data. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. To display space reference lines. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.West .Area B.rvt. click Training Files. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning view to activate it. 9 In the System Browser. 11 Close the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click in the Level 1 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. and click OK. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. click Finish Editing Zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Reference. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. expand 2 .Zoning. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . You activated zone visibility in the views. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. for Name.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.Zoning is highlighted.

10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 8 In the Level 1 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 Press Esc. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. zoom out.Zoning floor plan. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. click in the Level 2 . Select Attached End. Verify that the distance is 12mm.

the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . on the ViewCube. and zone information. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). and select 109 Lounge. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Front. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. space.Zoning to make it the active view. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. verify that Wireframe is selected. enter Lounge .East. and click OK. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.Zoning view.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. click Training Files. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. you verify the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. click the corner where the Top. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. double-click Level 1 . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.rvt. double-click the zone tag. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. for Name Value. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.

With 109 Lounge selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Click (Highlight). click (Isolate). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you isolate the space. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ On the Details tab. Using the Highlight tool. select 1_South_Area C. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. All spaces in the zone display in isolation.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Next. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.

22 °C : N/A is specified. cooling air temperature. and then click OK. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. verify that <Building> is selected.22 °C : N/A is specified.33 °C : 12. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Construction Type. click (Shading). This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This indicates the heating set point. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. This indicates the cooling set point. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. select Lounge/Recreation. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Next. and humidification set point. For Cooling Information. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. ■ ■ ■ Next. outdoor air per area. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and air changes per hour. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Below the list of spaces and zones. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . the space information displays for the selected space. For People. select 109 Lounge. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.11 °C : 32. For Heating Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that <Building> is selected. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. click . and then click OK. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. click . You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and dehumidification set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. verify that 21. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. scroll down in the left pane. click . verify that 23. heating air temperature. and in the People dialog. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. For Electrical Loads.

NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. floors. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 12 Using the methods learned previously. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. enter 0.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Cancel. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. select Level 3. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. roofs. and other room-bounding components. 15 In the Project Browser. open MEP . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. For Offset.

select Plenum. Because this is an unoccupied space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Under Energy Analysis. select Plenum. In this exercise. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and verify that the space has replaced the void. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. you verified building. for Number. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Energy Analysis. Click OK. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. For Name. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and zone information. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and select space Plenum 212P. enter 212P.

click in the Value field. For Building Construction. and click OK. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.Space Plan. and click Element Properties. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. verify that Manchester. this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate.rvt. for Building Service. double-click Level 2 . 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Energy Data. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. If. For Project Phase. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. select space Library 219. you need to select this option.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . verify that New Construction is selected. For Postal Code. for City. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. On the Place tab. NH. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. For Export Complexity. click Edit. verify that 300 is specified. verify that Level 1 is selected. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. right-click. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Ground Plane. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. under Volume Computations. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. enter 03101. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. On the Weather tab. In order to select a space. select School or University. For Location. 8 In the drawing area. verify that <Building> is specified. is selected. click Training Files. and click OK. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building.

and click OK. Click OK. verify that School or University is selected. for Values.Audio Visual. Select the space associated with the warning. verify that Manchester. select Specified. enter 45 W. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Building Service. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Next. For Condition Type. select Library . 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. both. for Values. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. click in the Value column. and click to learn the cause for the warning. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Heated and cooled. For Sensible. for Values. For Location. verify that <Building> is specified. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. is specified. click Edit. select Actual. and enter 15 sq. 12 Click the Details tab. Under Power. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . a cooling load. For Latent. You have verified the building information. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and then click . enter 60 W.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Actual. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. click Edit. For Space Type. for Values. Select Area per person. m. or neither. Click OK twice. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For People. select Specified. For Building Construction. NH.

NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. space. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. You should correct the space error in the building model. click Calculate. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. space. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. or make any changes to the model. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and can be modified here.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 17 In the loads report. There should be no warnings displayed. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Information). and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. and under Heating Information. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and a loads report displays. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. and click OK. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 19 In the drawing area. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 16 After you review the loads report. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. weather.Space Plan. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 21 Click OK. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. select 219 Library. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. or zone information. 15 Review the loads report for project. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and zone information for the building model. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. select 219 Library.11°C.

Click OK. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Color Scheme. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 3 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. select HVAC Zones.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. in relatively small increments.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Zoom in to the legend.

Expanded Ranges. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select Cooling Load . The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Schemes. The new scheme displays in the view. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In this exercise. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. click Training Files. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the next exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. 11 Using the method learned previously. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.

■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Under Available fields. enter . select Air Flow. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Spaces. for Select available fields from.Space Fill is the active view. In the Calculated Value dialog. click (Browse). For Phase. For Type. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select New Construction.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. enter Airflow Delta. enter Space Airflow Schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. ■ Click Calculated Value.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Name. more category options are available. select HVAC. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. and then click . Select Schedule building components. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . for Formula. and click OK. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Discipline. In the Fields dialog. Select Formula. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK. For Formula.

■ The schedule displays. Select Ascending. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. In the Color dialog. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. Under Conditions to Use. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. Header. select Not Between. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select red. For Value. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . select Level. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and then click Conditional Format. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and click OK. and Blank line. For Background Color. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. right-click to access schedule properties.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Click OK twice. click the color swatch. For Fields. select Airflow Delta. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. and then select Hidden field. a view opens that contains the selected space. select Level. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Then by. verify that Show is highlighted. select Number.

7 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In later exercises. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the next lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.

After system creation. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). 79 . you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. As you place the air terminals. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters. you will create supply air systems. In this lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. Then. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After completing the air systems lesson.

and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . the space crossing lines display. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. and scroll to space 223. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 In the ceiling view. click Training Files.

and press Enter. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. for Flow. type 3600. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and press Enter. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Also. If the host element is modified or moved. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. click Place on Face. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. which in this case is the ceiling grid. select the diffuser.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the hosted elements are updated as well. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. enter 215 L/s. as shown. 17 Move the cursor down. 9 On the Placement panel. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and then press Esc to end the command.

rfa. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. clear Leader. As you place the return diffusers. and then press Esc. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. as shown. click Place on Face. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the drawing area. click Yes. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. select one of the diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 29 Place 2 diffusers. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. 24 In the Open dialog. and click Open.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Next. 25 In the drawing area.

35 In the Instance Properties dialog. Level. for Reference. select one of the return diffusers. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. as shown. 32 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. and click to select the lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . click Yes. select Strong Reference.

and then press Esc twice. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. align the other return diffuser. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 40 In the drawing area. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 43 Using the same method. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select the vertical grid line as shown. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. as shown.

As you place the air terminals. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. for Flow. right-click. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. select both return diffusers. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. under Mechanical. 47 Using the same method. enter 310 L/s. and press Enter. clear LeftArrow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and on the Options Bar.44 While pressing Ctrl. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

select M_Supply Diffuser . for Scale. 10 In the drawing area. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. click 1 : 100. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. at the lower left corner of the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . verify that Tag on Placement is selected. and double-click Level 1 . expand HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.HVAC Plan . the space crossing lines display. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design to make it the active view.200 Neck. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Type Selector. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Training Files. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. type 6000. move the cursor down. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. By copying the diffuser.Airflow. Under Mechanical . for Offset. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. for Flow. under Constraints. 11 Select the diffuser. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. enter 170 L/s. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. and then press Enter. enter 2400. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. As a result. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. 15 Press Esc. Also. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .16 Using the same method. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. clear Leader. and then press Esc. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.

it is a negative value. and press Enter. and then right-click in the schedule. Type. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. under Available Fields. Next. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. click Edit. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. 29 Using the same method. for Sort by. and Flow. For Category. for Flow. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 25 Click OK 3 times. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. double-click System Type. type.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. tile the windows. 27 In the schedule. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. Mark. under space 115. mark. 26 Using the method learned previously. select Mark. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . enter 210 L/s. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and click View Properties. select Air Terminals. select 21. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. under Other. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. for Embedded Schedule.

The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. 31 In the drawing area.Design. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. and maximize Level 1 . 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Plan . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. as shown. As you highlight the zone. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.

7-18 kW .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. select M_WSHP .High Efficiency . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .3 times the heating load).97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. and under Energy Analysis. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.Horizontal . 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 35 In the Type Selector. 33 Click OK. 36 In the drawing area.43 W (approximately 1. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then create the logical connection between the system components. enter . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. right-click the title. However. 6 Keep the System Browser open. the space crossing lines display. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. As you add diffusers to systems. for Constraints ➤ Offset. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. including energy analysis.Design is highlighted. 44 Zoom in to space 115. When you highlight a space. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.HVAC Plan . Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. After creating the logical connection. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.rvt. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. review the Number of Elements. and Flow value. On the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. the air terminals are the children. Connect Into. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). and the system connects them. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 17 Using the method learned previously. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 12 In the System Browser. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. System Name. 18 Click OK. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. the number of elements is updated. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 In the drawing area. 15 Click Cancel.

you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In this exercise. for System Name. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. under Mechanical. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. which updates the name in the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m.Rename the system Next. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Mark. 22 Click OK. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. under Identity Data. 25 Click OK. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. In this exercise.rvt. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you create ductwork to physically connect system components.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select the upper left diffuser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . In this case. For Duct Type. which provides various layout tools. select Network. For Duct Type. enter 3000. and display solution 1. 4 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 5 On the Options Bar.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. for Solution Type. For Flex Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . the Network type provides several solutions.Round. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.HVAC Plan. 7 On the Options Bar. A Generate Layout tab displays. For Offset. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. the space crossing lines display. enter 3000. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Select Branch. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. click Settings. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Offset. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Also. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).

or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and use the drag control to drag it to the left. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. For example. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. click Modify. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. you’ll get an error in a later step. or offset elevations are incorrect. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select a different layout solution. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. Click OK. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 900. 9 On the Generate Layout panel.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 11 Click Finish Layout. as shown. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. The first time you press Tab. highlight a segment of the main duct. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. fittings. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click OK. If the entire network does not highlight. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. and equipment. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Usually. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . a disconnection exists. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Using a flow-based color scheme. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. select Duct Color Fill . 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.Flow. and click to select it. for Color Scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection.

under Mechanical . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. but not all values are used in this view. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. and then click OK. select By View.Airflow. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and on the Options Bar. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and press Enter. for Values Displayed. select the WSHP. for Flow. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Graphics. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. select one of the diffusers in the system. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 20 In the drawing area.

and enter . select Friction. and then click to select it. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Click OK. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select the color scheme legend. and select 400. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Under Constraints. and drag it to the right. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select Restrict Height. for Branch Sizing. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and then press Esc to clear the selection. 26 Click OK. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select Only. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . click Cancel. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select the upper segment of main duct. highlight a segment of the duct. for Schemes. select Calculated Size Only. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Duct Color Fill .Velocity.65 Pa/m.

Using this tool. and pressure loss. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. static pressure. pressure. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Use the information that displays (flow. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.The ductwork and fittings are updated. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE As you inspect a system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish. also known as the critical path. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 .

102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Draw Duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and select the WSHP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .HVAC Plan .

double-click MEP . click the corner where the Top. select the top right diffuser. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Options Bar. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . enter 3000. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Front.3D MEP. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. for Offset. 15 On the ViewCube. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and click Draw Duct. NOTE When drawing duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector grip.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 18 Make the floor plan the active view. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is automatically created. 19 In the drawing area. it is considered a closed loop.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. in space 115.

You can ignore the warning. 25 Press Esc.22 Using the same method. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

30 Press Esc twice. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

select a segment of the main duct. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and click OK.Airflow. and click to select it. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. such as a plenum. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 40 Using the same method.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. under Mechanical . 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. under Constraints. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. for Flow. clear Restrict Height. and then click OK.

108 .

Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Create return and supply piping systems. 109 . You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. In this lesson. Then. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. on level 3 of the building model. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .7-18kW .HVAC Plan .Horizontal High Efficiency . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. in corridor 328.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. and select M_WSHP .Left Return . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design is highlighted.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . and click to place the dimension. and enter 600. 8 Click the corridor wall face. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the top edge of the WSHP. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 7 On the Options Bar. as shown. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. verify that Wall faces is selected.

112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.) 14 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector.

and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Click Modify. enter 0. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter 2750. as shown.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Offset. for Water Flow.75 L/s. Under Mechanical.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. analyses cannot be performed.22 Close the file with or without saving it. You can create pipes to connect system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the logical connection between the system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). but without a corresponding system. you create the return and supply piping systems. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

Assigning a system component to an existing system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.rvt. click Training Files. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.Mech 330). Creating a Piping System | 115 . Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. As you assign equipment to systems. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. In the System Browser. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. select the 2 WSHPs. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . 5 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Piping. Therefore. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. while pressing Ctrl. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. where it is easier to review the information. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. right-click the Systems column heading. indicating that it’s the active view. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. This display indicates that the system is selected. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.

for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for System Name. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. 12 In the drawing area. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. You have created the hydronic return system. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and the Edit System tool is not active.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that on the Options Bar.

You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 25 Select the boiler. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and bypasses the cooling tower.HVAC Plan . double-click Roof . In cooling mode. and click OK. Creating a Piping System | 117 . the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. under Design ➤ HVAC . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. and select the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 19 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 22 In the Select Connector dialog.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. In heating mode.Design.

under Mechanical. and click Properties.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 28 Using the same method. including the flow rate and size of the component. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. You also manually modify the layout path as required. In the System Browser. expand Piping. enter 0. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand the Hydronic Return system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click Expand All. indicating the logical connection. you can view several parameters. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click OK. for Water Flow. and click OK. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Select. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.8. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Column Settings. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 29 Right-click CHWS. 32 In the System Browser.

IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . A system preview displays in red. and click to select it. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and click OK. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. 5 In the Filter dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.Mech 330). you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . select Mechanical Equipment. then the Select a System dialog displays. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. you can place the cursor over a system component. press Tab to highlight the system. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . click Check None.Design is highlighted.rvt. When you draw a box to select components. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. the boiler.

IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.9 In the Select a System dialog. 13 Click Cancel. structural beams. select Perimeter. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 10 Click OK. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. verify that Solutions is selected. duct. It does not reference the architecture. select CHWR. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. enter 450. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. or architectural components. 11 On the Options Bar. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. click Settings. For Inset. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Optionally. and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.75 L/s. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. to display the path with thinner lines. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. With each Tab. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the flow for each WSHP is 0.

and click OK.75 L/s). notice that the Water Flow is 1. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.50 L/s. 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.50 L/s. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. 22 Select the boiler. and click OK.

On the Options Bar. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 . 28 In the Project Browser. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. click Edit System. the Number of Elements is now 8. 27 On the System Tools panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.Design. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 32 Click Finish Editing System.

The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. so the total flow of 6. 38 Using the same method. you physically close the CHWR loop. and click Cancel.94 L/s. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.94 L/s. note that the value for Flow is 4. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 35 Using the drag control.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.50 L/s. access its instance properties. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. which propagates flow throughout the system. Next. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. under Mechanical. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.

NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select CHWS. For Inset. Click Settings. For Slope. 40 In the Select a System dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.00%. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 450. select a WSHP. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 41 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 0. and then click OK.

In a later exercise. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (Both sections are at the same elevation.

Either relocate the system components. as shown. or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 50 Using the same method. select a different layout solution. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 51 Click Finish Layout. To create the piping system. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. or offset elevations are incorrect. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe).

HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the return pipes are magenta.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. as shown. As you work in the training file. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. double-click 3D Building. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. as shown. 6 Press Delete. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 7 In the plan view.

9 In the 3D view. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. select the boiler.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .11 In the Select Connector dialog. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 12 In the 3D view. and the lower one is secondary. and click OK. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click Draw Pipe. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the return pipe riser. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 13 In the plan view. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping.

and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. for Offset. and you select 1 connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 600. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 381. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.In a plan view. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.

select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 19 In the plan view. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. As you place piping runs that are close together. and the appropriate fittings are created. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. 18 Press Esc twice.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .

24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click to draw the pipe. as shown. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select it. and click Draw Pipe. you select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. right-click the bottom connector.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.

and click Draw Pipe. enter 1200. 29 If necessary.28 Press Esc. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. select the primary base mounted pump. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

33 Press Esc. these pipe connections were created automatically. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 35 Using the method learned previously. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. right-click the bottom control on the tee.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.■ Move the cursor down. type 300. and press Enter. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . for Offset. and click to create the pipe. enter 2850.

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify. Next. You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system.

Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. Connect the cooling tower Next. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. and click Element Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. under Mechanical. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 46 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.44 L/s. 43 Press Esc. When you create the pumps in parallel. under Mechanical. as shown. 44 In the 3D view. view the properties for the secondary pump. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. notice that Flow is 6. right-click. 41 Using the same method. and click OK. The flow is being propagated through the piping. select the cooling tower. and click Element Properties. notice that under Mechanical. 48 In the plan view.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 40 Click Cancel.50 or 50% of the Flow. right-click. the value is 0 L/s.44 L/s). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . for Cooling Water Flow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. which is rounded up to 3. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

49 Press Esc. 50 In the 3D View. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.44 L/s. and close the dialog. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. select the cooling tower. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. When the valve is open. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.52 Close the file with or without saving it. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.rvt. as shown. the water bypasses the cooling tower.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. and is heated by the boiler. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Valves In this exercise.

and select M_Ball Valve . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. The bypass valve is closed by default. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. Adding Valves | 145 . 8 Press Esc twice.4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.

50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . parallel to the previously placed valve.10 Press Esc. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. place another M_Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method.

For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. under Mechanical.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click OK.44 L/s. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 147 . and click Element Properties. 19 Using the same method. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow is 6. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s.

50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 6.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Initially. In heating mode. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.44 L/s. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 20 Select the bypass valve. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. and select M_Ball Valve . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.rvt. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. click Training Files. 22 Using the method you just learned.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.44 L/s. and select M_Ball Valve . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan .Size.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click OK. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. as shown. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Flow. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Design is highlighted. and click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. select Pipe Color Fill . indicating that it’s the active view. click Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. for Schemes. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). or manually modify the pipe. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Either relocate the system components. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. enter 1. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Click OK. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and for Velocity. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. for Branch Sizing. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select a different layout solution. select Friction. Select And. and enter 220 Pa/m. 13 Press Esc. Under Constraints. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.5 m/s. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and click to select the branch. or offset elevations are incorrect.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. pressure. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.14 Close the file with or without saving it. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Inspecting the System | 151 . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. click Training Files.rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

flow. as shown. This information helps you modify the system design. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. and pressure information including pressure loss. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. An inspection flag reports the section number.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as required.

click Training Files. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.7. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and to size pipe. targeting those systems that need attention. In this exercise. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. for Fluid Temperature. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. 9 Using the same method. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Note that the Flow is 1.4 Pa.rvt. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and double-click Level 3 . you need to validate them. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.0 L/s. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. select 32° C. the Static Pressure is 41916. Warnings display. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. inspect Section 6 again.Design. 10 Click Finish.1 Pa. and click OK. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan .

and click View. right-click Hydronic Return. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. After you have assigned all components to systems.HVAC Plan .NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and select Level 3 . As you learned when placing components. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Show to view all of the system components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 7 In the System Browser. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.Design. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 6 In the Project Browser. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 12 In the System Browser. right-click the Systems titlebar. In the System Browser. and confirm unassigned system components. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.Design floor plan. double-click Level 1 . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. After you assign components to a system. the pipe is associated with that system. 4 In the System Browser. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.HVAC Plan . For example. expand the Unassigned folder. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. TIP If you have multiple views open. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. click Close. otherwise. 9 Right-click CHWS. and click Expand All. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. thus assigning the components to a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 10 Using the same methods. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. and for pipe sizing. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed.

Checking Piping Systems | 155 . and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Using the methods that you learned.

156 .

157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. expand Wiring . select Copper. enter 70. distribution systems. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Wire Sizes. ■ ■ For Material. speeding up the design phase. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. select Copper. For Temperature. enter 1. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Select Correction Factor. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. enter THHN. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 90. For Factor. ■ Click New Correction Factor. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. wiring.rvt. For Material. click (Open).Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. click Training Files. As you place components and create circuits. Click OK. select Wiring Types.04. You also add a wiring type. and demand factors that are applied in the design.

0. select THHN. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. enter 2000. select Power. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. Under More Than. For Insulation. For Value. For Minimum. Select Neutral Required. enter 220. select Single. For Maximum. select 10000 VA. enter 240. For Phase. For Conduit Type. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. By specifying a range. enter 240. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . select Voltage Definitions. For Neutral Multiplier. select Distribution Systems. Click Split. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 50. select Hot Conductor Size. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. select 240. For Wires. select 3. For Max Size. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 120/240. select 120. For Neutral Size. select Demand Factors. Click OK. enter 1. For L-G Voltage. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. For L-L Voltage. enter 250. select 75. select Steel. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions.

Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. such as offices. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). For Group Parameter Under. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Electrical . select Spaces. and double-click Level 2 . 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click (Open). zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.Lighting. click Add. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Under Categories. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser.Lighting Plan. select Illuminance. Later in the tutorial. For Discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels.Lighting group in the space element properties. 5 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Verify that Instance is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. under the Electrical . you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. and conference rooms. select Electrical. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. click Training Files. enter Required Lighting Level. For Type of Parameter. Click OK twice.rvt. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. restrooms.

7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. double-click Required Lighting Level. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Click OK. enter Space Lighting Requirements. Click OK. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings.Lighting. enter Open Office. and for Key Name. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Electrical . enter Lighting Levels. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. under Available Fields. Select Schedule Keys. enter 485. For Name. select Spaces. and click OK. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

select Required Lighting Level. change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. Select Blank Line. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 21 Click OK twice. click Edit. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . Notice that as you enter the data. for Sorting/Grouping. 22 Using the same method. which is mapped to project units.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type.Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Later in this exercise. In this exercise. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. for Lighting Levels. click (Open). which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . 27 Click OK. under Identity Data. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. the value input applies only to the selected space. select Instruction-Standard. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value.

00 lx still selected. and press ENTER. select Required Lighting Level. click (Duplicate). then the new value will be 400 lx. and press Enter. for Name. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Select the scheme for 500 lx.00 lx. Select the scheme for At Least 20. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click Training Files.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. and in the At Least column. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. For Color. enter 200. enter Required Lighting Levels.00 lx. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. and press ENTER. click (Add Value) again. select Spaces.00 lx. enter Required Lighting and click OK. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. enter 900. verify the By Range is selected. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. Select the scheme for 450. enter 800. For example.00. and click (Add Value) five times. for Category.00. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. for Title. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. ■ Click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.rvt. Under Schemes. and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200.

For Color Scheme. Click OK. select Required Lighting. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. enter Lighting Delta. Name.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. select Spaces.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical. 13 Click Calculated Value. double-click Number. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. For Type. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. 8 In the drawing area. Average Estimated Illumination. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. Level. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and Required Lighting Level. for Available Fields. For Name. select Illuminance. select Spaces. and double-click Level 2 . For Discipline.Lighting CF. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

press the spacebar. Select Header. Click Background Color. Select Blank Line. Click Conditional Format. for Test. select Not Between.■ For Formula. type a hyphen. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK. for Sort by. select Required Lighting Level. For Value. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Average Estimated Illumination. under Condition. for Formula. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Click OK twice. and click Browse. select Lighting Delta. select Red. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. for Fields. Click OK three times. click Browse. select Level. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.

16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create a panel schedule. Then. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. power circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. First. Create power loads. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. as you place lighting fixtures. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. 171 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Use the System Browser to check your design.

3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. click (Open). Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. 2 In the drawing area. 7 In the Project Browser. Click OK.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . for the Spaces Category.rvt. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. You can create additional color schemes. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Average Estimated Illumination. By using orange as the color for this range. select the color legend. In the Color dialog. click Training Files.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.Lighting Ceiling plan. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Lighting CF view is open. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Orange. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. 8 In the Project Browser. Under Scheme Definition. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. for Basic Colors.

Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 13 Click the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. zoom to space Library 219.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range.

the fixtures will move accordingly. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.5 fc range is satisfied. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 18 Click to place the fixture.the +/. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.5 fc range. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.277V. 19 Press ESC to end the command.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

In the Name dialog. ■ Under Electrical Loads. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type.00 VA. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. scroll to view space space Library 219. enter 162. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. for Apparent Load. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Name enter and click OK.

Under Electrical. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.rvt. select Xenon and click OK. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Under Photometrics. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.00 lm. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. select T5 [HO]. click the value for Initial Intensity. Placing Switches. select 463T5_S. 9 In space Library 219. click the value for Light Loss Factor. and click OK. for Lamp. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select the top center fixture. Junction Boxes. enter . Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.ies and click Open. specify 15000. ■ Under Photometrics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter F15. In the next exercise. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.93. Placing Switches. 2 In the drawing area.85. you add switches. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ■ Click Apply. for Ballast Loss Factor. In the Select File dialog. enter . and receptacles to your design. for Color Preset. and Receptacles | 183 . click the value for Initial Color. for Type Mark. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. click (Open). ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Under Photometrics. Junction Boxes. select Luminous Flux. junction boxes. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ Click OK twice.

7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Select M_Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector.NoLoad. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 185 . Junction Boxes. 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type M_Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog.

18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Under Electrical. In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Click OK twice. 15 Select the junction box. zoom to space Library 219. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter JB-1NL. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. NOTE When entering values. Click Edit Type. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Level 2 . note the Number of Poles is 1. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 21 In the drawing area. for Mark. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.Offset.14 Press ESC to end the command. enter 2750. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.

Distribution System. Expand Electrical. Space Number. Expand General. 26 In the System Browser.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. NOTE If necessary. and Voltage. and Number of Elements. 24 For any column. Space Name. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 23 In the System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Click OK. Placing Switches. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Junction Boxes. Select Size. Select Load. and Receptacles | 187 . right-click and click Column Settings. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Junction Boxes. 40 On the Options Bar. move the cursor along the wall. select Copy and Multiple. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle.

43 Press ESC to end the command. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down.

Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).208V MCB . 2 In the drawing area. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click (Open). zoom to the space Electrical 220. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.rvt. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).Surface: 100A.

enter 20. 7 Press ESC to end the command. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .480V MCB . for Max. for Max. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Loads. #1 Pole Breakers. Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. enter 20. enter LP-2B.Loads. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Distribution System. For Panel Name. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. enter PP-2B. select 480/277 Wye. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 14 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers. 8 Select the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. 15 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Instruction 221. 23 In the Filter dialog.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. which is the logical connection between the elements. click Check None. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 20 In the drawing area. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. and for Category.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 38 Press ESC to end the command. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. enter 2. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. Click OK. Click OK. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.39 Using the same method. click Check None. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Next you create circuits without showing wire. for Hot Conductors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. except without wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 In the drawing area. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click (Open). and for Category. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and create permanent wiring.Loads. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit.rvt. select Wires. 42 In the Filter dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.

17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and then expand circuit 1. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Voltage. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. and Voltage Drop are selected. Expand Electrical. expand Power. 13 In the System Browser. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Click OK. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and verify that Load. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Rating. Distribution System. right-click on the Systems heading.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click Tags. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 30 Close the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. under Electrical. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. change the Voltage to 277V. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Click OK.

39 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. click below the first one to place it. select Break. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 40 Click OK twice. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . click Edit Type. under Identity Data. Click Yes.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. enter FR4. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. for Type Mark. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 47 In the drawing area. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. For Circuit Number. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard.

204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. enter a comma. Click Save. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 54 Select all of the tags. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 57 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. click Check None. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. and click Apply. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 52 In the Save As dialog.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Click OK. and for Category. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. click Training Files. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. for File Name. Click OK. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Next you create a switch system.rvt. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area.rfa. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. click (Open). 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222.

enter a. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Switch ID. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 2 In the drawing area. under Electrical Lighting. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. for switch ID. enter b. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Lighting. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Click OK.

Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 2. for Hot Conductors. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and for Category. select Electrical Fixtures. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 2 In the drawing area. Click OK. Click OK. and data systems. and click Element Properties. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Check None.Loads. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. lighting. click Training Files.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Next you create a circuit and size wire. under Electrical . select the PP-2B panel. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space.rvt. 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 7 In space Electrical 220. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Circuits are used for power.

rfa. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and click to select the circuit. 15 In the Load Family dialog.13 Select the wire again. select Wiring. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. 19 Click OK. and in the drawing area. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.

24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 26 Press Delete. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 28 In the drawing area. as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. 22 In space Electrical 220.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Next you balance the loads for your design. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. click Open. 1-#12. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 3 In the Electrical space. click Rebalance Loads. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 6 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Had there been a greater imbalance.rvt. Under Electrical-Loads. for Rating. 1-#10. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Scroll down. zoom to space Electrical 220. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. 1-#10. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. enter 30A. After re-balancing loads. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 1-#12. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. the distribution is shifted.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 2 In the drawing area. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Finally. click Training Files. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. select panel LP-2B.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 24 Click Select Panel. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. enter 40A. and click Finish Editing Circuit. for Rating. enter 25A. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. under Electrical . 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. for Rating. and click OK. and click OK. select the transformer TP-2B. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Next you create a panel schedule. 15 Select panel PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 17 Close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.Loads. under Electrical . A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.

Under Header Text. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. click Edit. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Select PP-2B. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. for Font Size. select Berlin Sans FB. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click (Open). You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Under Header Text. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. click Training Files. The Panel Schedule Report displays.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Click OK. for Font Size. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. select Bold and Italic. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Appearance. enter 5 mm. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 In the Project Browser. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 10 Click OK twice. and open E601 . expand Sheets (all). Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 4 Close the report.Panel Schedules. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. for Font. Under Body Text. 5 In the Project Browser. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. under Other. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. enter 4 mm.

214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. Expand Unassigned. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. press TAB once.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. each with a load of 180VA. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. click Training Files. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. click (Open). notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. select space Lounge 212. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. In the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.rvt. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.

22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. zoom to space Electrical 214. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Checking Your Design | 215 . Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area. for Panel. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. select MDP-1. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. In the System Browser. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 16 Close the details dialog. 15 In the dialog. under Warnings. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

216 .

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. you create a PVC pipe type. click Duplicate.Plumbing Plan . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. right-click PVC .Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Name dialog. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and click OK. In this lesson. type PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in addition to loading existing families. In this exercise. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. planning is critical to a successful design.Sanitary.Vent. 219 . Adding a pipe size. and click Properties. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.

Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 27 For the new pipe size. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . click Pipe Settings. 13 In the right panel. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 .293 mm. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.Sch 40 . enter 54. enter 45. select Tee. select Branch. select M_Tee Sanitary .DWV: Standard. 21 In the right pane. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.Sch 40 . Tap.DWV: Standard.000 mm. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.PVC . click Modify. PVC . enter -1250. for Nominal. enter 10°. 25 For Outside. select Sanitary.Vent is listed.PVC . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. For Offset. 6 Click OK. select Plastic. 22 Click New Size. 10 On the Selection panel. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Cross. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. click Training Files. 24 For Inside Diameter. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.PVC . 17 In the left pane.5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Pipe Types. under Mechanical.006 mm. and click OK. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and click Main. select None. 18 For System Type. for Material. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Tee.rfa. 26 Click OK. 15 For System Type.DWV. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. and open Metric\M_Trap P . In the Project Browser. enter 46. select Sanitary.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. 221 . Create the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and hot and cold water piping. add a hot water heater. Create the sanitary plumbing system. sanitary piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. as shown. 16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. a toilet. for example. The base is placed. select one of the components in the system. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. A preview of the piping layout displays. select Sanitary 107.

230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Slope.Sanitary. 30 Click Modify. 23 For Pipe Type. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.05%. select PVC . for Solution Type. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. The default settings are automatically modified. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and for Offset. select 100 mm. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 21 On Options Bar. 25 In the left pane. enter -1225. enter -350 mm. 26 For Pipe Type. enter -350 mm. select PVC . and modify it to meet project requirements. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Main. enter 1. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click OK. click Solutions. select Intersections. 28 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. and click Settings. 24 For Offset. 27 For Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 29 On the Options Bar. select Branch. You accept this suggested solution.Sanitary.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.33 In the 3D view. as shown. 34 Click Modify. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.36 Using the previous method.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Overall. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control.

Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 On the Placement panel.Design is open. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown. and verify that Level 1 . under M_Lavatory . click Training Files. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. select 560 mmx560 mm . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Rectangular. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Element panel. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Public. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in the Type Selector.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple.2. 8 Select the sink. and press Enter to create a second sink. On the Options Bar. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . enter 711. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.7 Click Modify.

Press Esc.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. click Add To System. enter 711. 15 Click the 3 sinks.2. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 12 In the drawing area. and press Enter to create the third sink. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. In the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. as shown. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.16 On the Edit System panel. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. under Design ➤ Plumbing . double-click 3D Plumbing . 20 Select the fitting. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 21 Select the tee.Overall. 19 In the 3D view.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.05%. enter 760 mm. for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click to draw the pipe. and click Apply. for Slope. press Spacebar. 27 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. 24 On the Options Bar.22 In the plan view. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. with the tee fitting selected. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). When you press the Spacebar.

select Standard. move the cursor over the stub pipe. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . click to place the fitting.Sch 40 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 30 In the 3D view.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 31 Click Modify. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 29 In the Type Selector.DWV. and when the vertical center line displays.PVC .

33 With the fitting selected. for Offset. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 34 Press Esc. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. 36 In the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. on the Options Bar. enter 305 mm. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 150 mm. right-click the right connector. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 37 Select the fitting. In the next steps. double-click the section head to open the section view.

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 42 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.

enter 150 mm. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and click Draw Pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 48 Click Modify.

56 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 53 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 51 In the Type Selector. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.Sch 40 .DWV. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 55 In the 3D view. select Standard. under M_Trap P . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .PVC . 52 In the plan view.

Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. In the plan view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click in the plan view. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. select the left P-Trap.. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Press Esc. In the Type Selector. while pressing Ctrl. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select PVC Sanitary. select the section of pipe you just drew. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. as shown. and select a proposed solution. On the Routing Solutions panel.■ In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. under Pipe Types.

and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. for Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. adjusting the sanitary stack. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. and verify the slope. 62 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .05% is selected. verify that 1.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. click Training Files. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select the elbow fitting on the right. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.PVC .DWV.Plumbing Plan . 7 On the Selection panel. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select Standard. 3 In the Section view. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . right-click the top connector. as shown.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Design. and click the intersection to place the fitting. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and click to draw the pipe. select the vertical stack. 9 In the Type Selector.Floor level line. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 10 In the 3D view. click Modify.Overall.Design.Sch 40 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 5 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. click Training Files. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Right-click Standard.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and click Duplicate. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.autodesk. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You create a new pipe type. In this lesson. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.rvt. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. However. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. go to http://www. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. 267 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. If the tutorial training files are not present. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In this tutorial. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. After finishing each exercise.

You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. under Mechanical. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. for Material. structural beams. duct. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Fire Protection Wet. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. Next. In this exercise. For System Type. In the left pane. and click Properties. For System Type. 9 Click OK. and then click OK. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. However. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. 6 In the Project Browser. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. For Offset. verify that 2800 is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. select Carbon Steel. select Fire Protection Wet. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Main. For Offset. verify that 2800 is specified. For Pipe Type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. click Rename. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. you create project parameters and work with schedules.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. or architectural components.

For Group parameter under.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. the space crossing lines display. select space Instruction 221 as shown. select the upper half of the building. right-click.Design is highlighted. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . click Add. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. 8 Using a crossing window. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Sprinkler Zone. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Zone 1. for Name. select Fire Protection. and click Element Properties. select Spaces. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files.rvt. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. Under Categories.Fire Protection Piping Plan . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Click OK twice.

270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Using the same method. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. enter Zone 2. and then click OK. click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone. verify that only Spaces are selected. for Sprinkler Zone. and click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. select Zone 1. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and then access instance properties. under Fire Protection.rvt. under Fire Protection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 In the Filter dialog. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. including a calculated value parameter. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. to which you add various parameters.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then click OK. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

double-click on each column separator. For Group parameter under. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. For Rounding. enter Maximum Spacing. Obstructed-Combustible. select Maximum Spacing. select Fire Protection. and click Field Format. select mm. Select Schedule keys. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Unit symbol. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 11 Click OK twice. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Millimeters. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. enter Protection Area Construction Type. For Type of Parameter. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Formatting tab. For Key name. For Units. 7 Click OK. 6 Using the same method. select Spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. select Length.Fire Protection Piping Plan . create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select 0 decimal places. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. click the Formatting tab. enter Light. click Add Parameter. The schedule displays. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Name. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.Design is highlighted. and on the ribbon. 14 Select the new header. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. for Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 10 In the Format dialog.

based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Click OK. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. For Name. enter 40. enter 4575. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Unobstructed Ordinary.

select Area. select Fixed. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select 0 decimal place. 20 On the Formatting tab. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Rounding. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 22 Click OK twice. For Discipline. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Type. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and click Field Format. under Available fields. In the Fields dialog. For Units. and click OK. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. Click OK. select Common. click . The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 .

and click View Properties. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Grand totals. for Sort by. Under Field formatting. For Then by. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level. click Edit. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Other. For Then by (second instance). Select Header and Blank line. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. and then click Field Format. select Level. At the bottom of the dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. For Fields. and select Totals only. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. Select Header and Blank line. verify that Use default settings is selected. and then select Hidden field. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Hidden field.

37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click the schedule. click Edit. and click View Properties. for Filter. select Count. for Fields. select Embedded Schedule. select Calculate totals. select Sprinklers. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. double-click Type. select Level equals Level 2. under Other. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. select Grand totals. System Name. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. click Edit. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Embedded Schedule. and select Totals only. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and click View Properties. and Count.27 In the drawing area. 30 Click OK twice. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Category. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Available fields. for Filter by. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. delete the word Maximum. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab.

and access the instance properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Unobstructed. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click OK.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 52 Click OK. double-click FP . you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 44 In the schedule. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. but their values are not determined. and the spacing parameter values are evident. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. As a result. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select Light. select space 221 Instruction. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).Fire Protection Plan Design. 50 Access the instance properties. 43 Click Cancel. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the floor plan. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select space 221 Instruction. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Ordinary. under Identity Data. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select Ordinary. 41 In the plan view. under Identity Data.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. As you place the sprinklers. you can choose to save your work. However. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.autodesk. At the end of this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. If the tutorial training files are not present.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you will understand the process. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. By following the recommended workflow. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. methodology. click Training Files. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. As you create the system. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.rvt. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 279 . you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 3 In the Project Browser.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When there is a small misalignment. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. After placing the initial sprinkler. When this happens. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 13 On the Options Bar. while pressing Ctrl. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 10 Press Esc twice. as shown. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and click to place 3 sprinklers. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and 207. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 11 In the drawing area. verify that Constrain is cleared. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. select the sprinklers that you placed. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 206. Also. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

Design. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. and 200C). open Design ➤ FP . 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. specify a vertical offset. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 17 In the Project Browser. 200B. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Next. 18 Type WT. and then press Esc. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.

you adjust the offset. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and with piping (physical connection). and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . enter 4100. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. For Number.FP_Ceiling view.0. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Notice that the schedule updates. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. for Offset. enter 2900 mm. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. under Constraints. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. In the next exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and press Enter. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. In this exercise. 25 Click OK. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Next. enter 11. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. After creating the logical connection. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. This number is determined in the schedule. 29 Press Esc. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.19 In the floor plan. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and click Element Properties. move the cursor to the right. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).

they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. click Training Files. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 5 Right-click the header. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.Fire Protection Plan . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click View ➤ Systems. 1 In the Project Browser. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select Piping.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.rvt. as shown. Unlike logical connections (systems). However. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

It does not indicate a pipe layout path. press Tab. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. within the Piping Systems folder. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Next. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. In the System Browser. indicating the logical connection. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and click Select. and select the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Creating a Piping System | 285 . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 With the system still selected. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers.

This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. In the left pane. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 20 On the Generate Layout panel.Wet is selected. system equipment. verify that 2800. providing system editing tools.0 is specified. verify that Main is selected. select Branch. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 23 For Offset. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. enter -3650. When the layout is finished. and number of elements in the system. for System Name. 12 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and a piping layout preview displays. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. For Offset. 19 Click OK. 13 In the System Browser. select 150 mm. 15 In the drawing area. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. for Diameter. click Solutions. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. click Place Base. 22 On the Options Bar. For Pipe Type. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. as shown. click Settings. and on the Options Bar. 24 On the Generate Layout panel.The Edit Piping System panel displays. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 14 Click Finish Editing System.

the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines). 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. verify that Network is selected. In general. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. A (parallel movement control) displays. Creating a Piping System | 287 . First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. On the Generate Layout panel. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. and select solution 4. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. or that offset elevations are incorrect. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. as shown. 32 If necessary. select a different layout solution. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or manually modify the pipe. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 29 Click Finish Layout. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Either relocate the system components.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Next.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .33 Close the file with or without saving it. and select the elbow fitting as shown. and then you create piping to physically connect them.Fire Protection Piping Plan .rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools.Design is highlighted. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. 3 If necessary. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 1 In the Project Browser. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . the Connect Into tool.

and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Finish Editing System. air terminals. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. click Add To System. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 8 In the corridor. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. mechanical equipment. and so on) are logically connected by a system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and pipe or duct is created. or a system component to display system tools. 5 In the drawing area. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. radiators. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.

Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. verify that Network is selected. and then tile the views. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. and select solution 5. 12 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 23 View the result in the 3D view.11 On the Generate Layout panel. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 14 Close the System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. verify that Solutions is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. for Solution Type. 13 Click Finish Layout.

select 2800.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 In the drawing area. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. and click Draw Pipe.24 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc. 25 Select the sprinkler. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. for Offset. right-click. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 29 Using the same method.

2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.Design is highlighted. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.Fire Protection Piping Plan . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. select 1 : 50. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Because the whole system highlights. click Training Files. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .rvt. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. for Scale. 31 In the plan view. indicating that it’s the active view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 8 Right-click. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click on the section head to open the section view.6 Press Esc. and click View Properties.

for View Name. enter FP Section_Stair.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Under Identity Data. 15 Press Spacebar.Fire Protection Plan . drag the top section boundary line up. 12 If necessary. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. for Sub-Discipline. and press Enter.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 22 In the drawing area. and then click Modify. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and click Apply Default View Template. 10 In the Project Browser. 19 Make Level 2 . right-click Design ➤ FP . For Default View Template. 14 Select the tee fitting. Click OK. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . and select Hose Reel Cabinet .Design the active view. and click Draw Pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and then right-click the top connector. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. For View Classification. select Design. enter 2135.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. select FP . and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 17 Move the cursor up. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select MEP Section.

verify that Automatically Connect is active. 24 Select the cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 On the Options Bar. for Diameter.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). and then click Modify. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet.23 In the section view. select . 27 On the Placement Tools panel.

A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. as shown. and click Open. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . and then click Modify. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. 31 In the alert dialog. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 33 In the Type Selector.rfa. verify that M_Gate Valve .50 mm is selected. click Yes to load a family.29 Close the section view. 32 In the Open dialog.

you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. click Training Files. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

starting at the lower left corner of the wing. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 6 In the Filter dialog. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. 8 Click Modify. select 25mm. for Diameter. and click OK. width. or width. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. width. 7 On the Options Bar. Changing the diameter. or height. click Check None. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. 4 In the floor plan view. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 17 On the View Control Bar. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Clear Leader. By hiding the linked file. click to place the tag. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. select the linked architectural file. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 12 If necessary. and click Open.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. . 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. and after each segment highlights. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). Press Esc. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 In the 3D view. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog.rfa. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown.

press Tab.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 21 On the Options Bar. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . select 100mm. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red. and when the section highlights.

The pipe diameter is modified.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then tag the piping as shown. and maximize the floor plan. select 40mm. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 26 Using the same method. as shown. 24 In the drawing area. 23 Close the 3D view. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205.

The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this tutorial. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You added tags to pipes. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. For additional practice. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. In this exercise.

304 .

305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. create details.

306 .

If the view included detail graphics. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and view references. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. matchlines. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Properties. and apply a view template.rvt. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. dependent views. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. under Floor Plans.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click Rename. as shown. 7 Close the file without saving.rvt. and click Apply Default View Template. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 10 In the drawing area. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. create dependent views for areas B and C. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 6 In the Project Browser. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and then press Esc. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 4 Using the same method. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . views and put them on the sheet. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. more focused. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 9 Click OK.

In the Color dialog. select Double Dash . Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 14 Click Finish Matchline. and click OK. select black. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 13 Press Esc twice.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. click the current value. select 11. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. and then press Esc. For Line Pattern. For Line Weight. Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 19 In the drawing area. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.

21 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. on the Options Bar.20 Select the upper view reference and. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. as shown. for Target view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.

27 Using the same method. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . select Plumbing Isometric. 2 Zoom in. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. enter Plumbing Isometric . and click Properties. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for View Name. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and zoom to each of the view references. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click 3D Plumbing. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and select the section box. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.

9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click to select it. and then click OK. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Apply Default View Template.Domestic Water. select Documentation. Click OK. For Sub-Discipline. Click Apply. select Dash. 10 Right-click. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Plumbing.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for View Classification. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. right-click Plumbing Isometric . For Pattern. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. The section crop lines no longer display. select 3.

13 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 15 Right-click.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). and click to select it.

click on the Format value. and in the view properties. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. On the View Control Bar. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing.Sanitary Waste. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. For Slope. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 19 Using methods learned previously. and in the Type Selector.16 Press Esc.5mm Arial. verify that Common is selected. and for Default View Template. 18 Label the fixtures as shown.Isometric. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. select 1. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. specify Plumbing . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.

indicating that it’s the active view. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the Format dialog. 26 Press Esc twice. you use a plan view to create a callout view. as shown. click Training Files. When the view is associated with a sheet. 22 Click OK twice. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. for Rounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. and then place the callout view on a sheet. select To the nearest 10. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.

Creating Callout Views | 317 . select 1 : 50. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. for Scale. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 5. and select the viewport. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. under Sheets (all). drag it to the sheet. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. using the same method. Click OK. double-click M601 . for Line Weight. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 In the Project Browser.

17 In the Project Browser. For Title on Sheet. for View Name. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . For Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. right-click the callout view.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Click OK. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter WSHP PART PLAN.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

and click OK. under Names. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Apply View Template. and click Rename. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click the detail view. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Callout Views | 321 . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

322 .

and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. symbols. 323 . you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. and annotation to create a legend. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. duct tags. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. Creating Annotations In this exercise.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.rvt. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. work with model-based components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. linetypes.

6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 9 Press Esc twice. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 With the text still selected.

and then click Right Straight.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. Creating Annotations | 325 . Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. and a segment of rectangular duct. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. a segment of round duct. 16 In the drawing area. a return diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. for Ducts. 22 In the Tags dialog.17 Click Modify. click Load. and click Open.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. and click OK. 21 In the Load Family dialog. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.rfa. 25 In the drawing area. If necessary. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . under Category. 24 On the Options Bar. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. as shown. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 20 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.

30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select Horizontal. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Leader. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP.26 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 327 . open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. select Free End. 34 In the drawing area. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. for Leader. as shown. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. 36 Press Esc twice.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. select the last tag placed. for Leader Arrowhead. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. 37 In the drawing area. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 40 Using the method learned previously. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. not simply an instance property. That’s because you changed a type property. click Training Files. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. lay out. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and all elements of that type are affected. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Creating Dimensions | 329 . and lock lighting fixtures. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style.

11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. select the dimension line. 13 Press Esc. On the Options Bar. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 12 Click EQ. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then select the interior face of the wall. 14 Using the same method. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.

and press Enter.rvt. and notes. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. linework. Because the dimensions are locked. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend | 331 .Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. annotation symbols. enter 2430. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and offset them from the wall. 20 Using the same methods. click Training Files. 17 Press Esc. click the 3 interior locks on the line.9). 19 Select the dimension value (3376. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.

2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Diffuser Legend. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and select 1. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 10 Using the same method. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For Scale. Click OK. For View.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.200 Neck. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 5 Click in the drawing area. click below the title to place the diffuser.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Floor Plan. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. select 1 : 50.

and select 1.11 Press Esc. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 In the drawing area. Creating a Legend | 333 .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.

DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 24 Select the component’s break line. The selected detail lines are now thin. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.DROP and its text note.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.RISE symbol for the copy start point.

Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 34 Using the method learned previously. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. enter E. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Creating a Legend | 335 .30 Select Spot Elevation .

41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Title w Line . 40 Press Esc. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected.

2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . In the left pane of the Open dialog.113 East elevation view. A detail callout that references another view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. detail groups. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting view using detail components. 337 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m.Detailing 15 In this lesson. and text. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.

Next. place Power Riser . clear Leader.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 East on the sheet. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 8 Using the same method. 5 In the drawing area. select each of the 2 panelboards. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and click to place it. and then modify and align the views.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 4 On the Options Bar. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

right-click. and click Activate View. 13 Right-click. and click Deactivate View. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 113 North view. and click OK. for Title on Sheet. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. giving the appearance of a single view. under Identity Data. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.9 Press Esc. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.

as shown. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you add wiring to the diagram. 22 Press Esc. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Activate View. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. In the next exercise. select the 113 East elevation view. 21 Using the drag control. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and select Title w Line . right-click.

expand Lines. In the New Subcategory dialog.113 North view.rvt. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 6. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. enter Electrical Power. In the Line Styles dialog. As you draw. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . click Training Files. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. as shown. notice that there are no snaps active. and then click OK. verify that Chain is selected. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Under Modify Subcategories. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 2 Close the Project Browser. for Line Weight. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 8 On the Options Bar. click New. for Name.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown.10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). enter 3mm.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). as shown. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

select Multiple. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and select 1. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 On the Options Bar. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 31 While pressing Ctrl.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 28 Click above the cap. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 29 Click Modify. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.

and press Enter. 40 Press Esc. enter 3. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 7. for Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and press Enter. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 12. Press Esc.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. change the length of the bottom line to 3. and then press Esc. Using the same method. click on the length dimension value. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . you can ensure that they stay together. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. You enter exact values for each line length.0.

expand Groups ➤ Detail.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. for Name. 46 In the Project Browser. 47 In the drawing area. 54 Select the group. 51 Using the method learned previously. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. while pressing Ctrl. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. TP-2B. enter Ground. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 50 With the group selected. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and then press Esc. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. select all 3 lines. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 52 Select the detail group.

You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and will place it on sheet E01.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

and double click Typical Make Up Air. 8 On the ViewCube. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.rvt. and click OK. select 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 5 Right-click the copy. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 4 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. click Home. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. 3 Select the section box. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and Left sides converge. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. Back. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . Walkthroughs. and then click the corner where the Top. for Name. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Apply View Template. and then press Esc.

label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor down and to the left.■ ■ Under Names. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select 3D HVAC Iso. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Click OK. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to specify the second leader point. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method.

To rotate and reposition a text label. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. select Crop Region Visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 23 Click on the crop region. as shown. and under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.18 Press Esc. as shown. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Complete the text labels. and then click OK. under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 24 Access the instance properties for the view.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Crop View and Section Box. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 In the Instance Properties. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. clear Crop Region Visible. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and click Deactivate View. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and click Activate View. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .25 Click OK. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and under Extents. scroll down. and click OK. click Training Files. and click View Properties. 33 Right-click the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. Place a detail component. 29 Right click the view. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.rvt. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 30 On the View Control Bar. specify 1 : 2 for the scale.

6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. for Sub-Discipline. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select Documentation. 9 Zoom in to the component. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. and click Properties. select 1 : 5. Click OK. For View Classification. as shown. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 3 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. For Scale. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Plumbing. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point. 12 On the Element panel. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click the point at the top of the drain. 13 In the drawing area. right-click the view name.

Concrete. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and then press Esc. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. and click OK. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .I. select C. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 18 With the filled region still selected. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Modify.P. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 21 In the drawing area. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select 1. for Type.

23 In the drawing area. 31 On the Options Bar. (Line). 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. select the filled region. 28 Click Modify. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. and then click to select them. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. select Multiple.

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab.

48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. (Rectangle). as shown. select the Flashing Membrane group.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 45 Using the method learned previously. and click OK. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. for Name. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.D. 49 Click Modify. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 52 In the Create Group dialog. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 55 Press Esc. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . press Spacebar twice. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.

360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 67 On the Options Bar. select Leader and Free End. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. as shown.62 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.

and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 71 Click Modify. 80 Press Esc twice.70 In the Keynotes dialog. and then click OK. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 81 Select the text note. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click to specify the second leader point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click to specify the text insertion point. 72 If necessary. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. select 15000 (Division 15 . 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 76 To select the leader start point.

84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

select the view title. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc twice. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 88 In the drawing area. 90 Press Esc. and click to place it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful